Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 .

2 .

What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Germany. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. 3 . including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements. electrical. Add more detailed modelling elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. such as duct. and plumbing engineering workflows.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. electrical panels. and piping. such as mechanical equipment. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. fixtures. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.

Contact your CAD manager for more information. you can choose to save your work. to provide a richer and more finished design. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Metric file names have an _m suffix. as well as how to open and save them. You do not design entire systems. when you add ductwork. Create detail views. For example. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. When you open a training file. however. such as templates and families. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. On the Contents tab. When you install the training files as instructed. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Create schedules. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. Metric: files for users working with metric units. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. is located and accessed in the training files location. However. After completing each exercise. So. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. you learn where the training files are located. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. and sheets to document the project. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. your Training folder may be in a different location. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. and tags. templates. In this exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . views. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. annotations. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. NOTE Depending on your installation. These elements enhance the exercises you complete.

click ➤ Save As.rvt. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Accessing Training Files | 5 .rvt) is selected. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. if you open settings. 3 In the right pane. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and click Save. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. the Open dialog displays. you are prompted to save the changes. and click the Training Files icon. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. double-click Imperial or Metric.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. For Files of type. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and you can open any supported file type. enter the new file name. For File name. 4 Click the training file name. scroll down. For example. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. select the folder in which to save the new file. verify that Project Files (*. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. and click Open.rvt and make changes.

6 .

The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. In this case. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . 2D and 3D view. If you move the partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. quantities. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and plans. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedules required for a building project. schedules. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the parameter is one of association or connection. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the hierarchy of elements. hence. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the operation of the software is parametric. the floor or roof remains connected.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. scope. and phases when you need it. every drawing sheet. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. drawing sheets. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. If the length of the elevation is changed. In the Revit MEP model. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You learn the terminology. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. sections. drawings. the door retains this relationship to the partition.

levels. ducts. sinks. and electrical panels. tags. boilers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. walls and ceilings are hosts. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. sprinklers. grids. They help to describe or document the design. sprinklers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sinks. and keynotes are annotation elements. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. dimensions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. When you change something. and reference planes are datum elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and electrical panels. dimensions. tags. Examples include detail lines. boilers. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ducts. They display in relevant views of the design. filled regions. For example.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. and 2D detail components. Datum elements help to define project context. For example.

categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. If you can draw. By using a single project file. Often. section views. top of wall. In Revit MEP. elevation views. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. In other cases. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. and drawings of the design. To place levels. However.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. or bottom of foundation. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. first floor. and types. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . The project file contains all information for the building design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. floors. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. you can explicitly control them. families. and ceilings. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Project: In Revit MEP. Most often. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. for example. from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. views of the project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. such as roofs. For example. you must be in a section or elevation view. and so forth). North . by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. programming is not required. schedules.

Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. A type can be a specific size of a family. hiding. System families include ducts.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. identical use. Type: Each family can have several types. such as a A0 title block. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). System families can be transferred between projects. showing. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. each in-place family contains only a single type. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. pipes. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. However. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. and similar graphical representation. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and wires. For example. You can also display several project views at one time. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Then experiment with them. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Unlike system and standard component families. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. With a few clicks. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. A type can also be a style. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same.

and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To return the panel to the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels.

tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and for switching views. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. When working on the Modify tab. and settings. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. select the tool first. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for editing existing elements.. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and CAD files. project and system parameters. architect-specific tools. then select what you want to modify.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. data and systems. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.

For example. when adding duct. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides requested information. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). To keep a panel expanded. provides access to common tools. By default. displays frequently used tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. closes the application menu (double-click).

. (Export) On the application menu. select a file to open. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Save As) export the current drawing.

(Licensing) close the file. Camera. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file. (Publish) print the current drawing. annotation. (Print) access product and license information. click. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. saves a current project. and Walkthrough. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. to. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu.. publish the current project. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . provides views including Default 3D. but is not enabled by default. or template file. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. To enable or disable a tool item. family.. annotation..

Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Group. Modify. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. repeat the command.To undo or redo a series of operations. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Clipboard. displaying the same information. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Starting with the most recent command. check the Status Bar. workshared components. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. However. To show the Status Bar again. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. or the Family Editor. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To hide the Status Bar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. When you are using a command. In addition. This displays the command history in a list. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. When you are highlighting an element or component. when you switch to another editing mode.

Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . for example. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify).To cancel or exit the current command. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. On the Quick Access toolbar. To change existing elements to a different type. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. When you place an element in a drawing. Place a Wall.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Zoom the view In the tutorials. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. In the following steps. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.rvt. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. For example.

SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Modifying the View | 19 . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 9 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 6 Click in the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. this is referred to as a crossing selection. on the Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. In the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. click . and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.

The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. and then using the Zoom tool again. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 14 To exit the wheel. As you move the mouse. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. press ESC. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and click tin the Options dialog. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. moving the wheel to the desired location. Click and drag to orbit the design. ➤ Options.

and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. Small blue dots.HVAC Plan . as shown. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. After you are familiar with these tasks. Similar controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. display along the ends. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR. bottoms. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and open Level 2 . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and select the duct. These are the drag controls.Design. called drag controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.

22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Move.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. select the first item in the list. In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. or press CTRL+Z.

and drag it to the left as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. click to specify the starting position. for example. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 11 With the duct already selected. as shown. After selecting the element to move. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. In this case. and click again to specify the ending position.Some commands. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

such as the Modify Ducts command.Return. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 14 Enter VG. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. For example. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Select Mechanical . (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 13 To end a command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Supply. Click OK.End a command Some commands. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Press ESC twice. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

6 Click OK. such as coordination review and interference checking. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. such as ducts and pipes.rte template. You can either select a template from the template library. use copy/monitor. the default building levels and standard views. select Project. and loadable families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. click Browse. 27 . 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. and open Metric ➤ Templates. 5 In the New Project dialog. You can choose from several templates. 2 In the New Project dialog. and modify system settings. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. Finally. you learn how to start a project from a template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. under Create new. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. create and manage views. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. click Training files. under Template file. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In that case. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and geometry from the starting template. and click Open. New projects inherit all the families. and open North. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. link files. settings. system families. 7 In the Project Browser. such as the default project units and settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You also learn how to use collaboration tools.

If you want to use a template other than the default. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. create another new project using the Construction template. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Manchester. you can select it now. under Energy Analysis. review the construction materials listed. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 10 Using the same method. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rte template and click Open. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Browse. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. for Energy Data. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file.8 In the drawing area. Click OK. Click OK twice. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. for City. (Browse). select Project template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. When you select the material. click Edit. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Level 1. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. In the Choose Template dialog. Click Cancel. click (Browse). 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Location. select School or University. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. NH. For example. ■ ■ Under Create new. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. navigate to Metric Templates. ■ For Building Construction. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog.

under Duct Settings. 260. piping. wiring. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.00 mm. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 22 In the right pane. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.rfa and click Open.00 mm. 140. under Duct Settings. power distribution systems. for 20.00 mm. for 90. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and 140. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 110. 24 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 25 In the left pane. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 26 In the right pane. Click OK twice. and fire protection systems.00 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Identity Data. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Rectangular. and 310. 33 Click OK. and demand factors for electrical systems. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage.00 mm.000 mm. for 90.00 mm. Holding CTRL. select Views. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .00 mm. For Categories. 27 Click OK.00 mm.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. 290. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Settings. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. plumbing.00 mm. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 23 In the left pane.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 110. click Sizes. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Round. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.

sheets. For Then by. 2 In the New Project dialog. families.rvt. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. For Sort by. 4 In the New Project dialog. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. In addition. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Training. under Template file. 5 Click OK. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Browse. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Click Open. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select View Name. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. To enable this coordination. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Associated Level. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. From the Positioning list. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 38 Close the file. select Sub-Discipline. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Family and Type. For Then by. under Create new. select Project. Linking Projects In this exercise. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. and groups that are contained in a project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit.Origin to Origin. select Auto . You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You need to create the MEP model for the project.

11 In the Type Properties dialog. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active.Mech. select Room Bounding. select the linked architectural model. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 8 If necessary. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 12 Click OK. Linking Projects | 31 . 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Constraints. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .

20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.Floor. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 17 On the Options Bar. click the level line for 03. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. click Plan View types.

highlight the linked model. After copying. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. a warning message displays. 29 In the drawing area. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. Linking Projects | 33 . which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. appears above the copied elements. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. select Custom. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. level 3. 27 In the drawing area. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. and that the copied elements are monitored. and the level 4. 34 On the Basics tab. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. click By Host View. and click to select the linked model. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. indicating that an element has changed. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. indicating that a relationship is established. If you modify a monitored element. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. click Custom. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. for the link file. warnings notify you of any violations.

Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK twice. and Topography. Planting. select Custom. Click OK. 5 On the Basics tab. under View Properties. Under Visibility. Under Visibility. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Click OK. click Edit. for the link file. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. click Custom. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 3 In the View templates dialog. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 2 In the New View Template dialog. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Roads. Select Show categories from all disciplines.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. for Name. deselect Parking. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 36 Click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Site. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Custom.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. deselect Levels.

you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 2 In the Options dialog. select Invert background color. notification preferences. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 3 Under Colors. These settings control the graphics. they are not saved to project files or template files. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte. 7 Click OK. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. under Template file. click Browse. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. click the Graphics tab. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. click the Graphics tab. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. 8 Click ➤ Options. select Mechanical and click OK. Modifying System Settings | 35 . and your username when using worksharing. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. under View Templates. selection default options. journal cleanup options. 9 In the Options dialog.

including your default project template. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. and click OK. For Tooltip assistance. 14 Click OK. select None. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.10 Under Colors. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 11 In the Color dialog. family template files. 12 Click the General tab. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 17 Press ESC to end the command. the elements causing the error display using this color. 21 Close the file without saving it. and family libraries. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 Select the wall. click the File Locations tab. 13 Under Notifications. click the value for Selection color. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. you specify default file locations. When an error occurs. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select yellow. However. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 2 In the Options dialog. select One hour. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element.

Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. centralized. When you are opening. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. under Default path for family template files. Specifying File Locations | 37 . You can modify the existing library names and path. click Browse. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. saving. TIP To view a template. and you can create new libraries. you can start a new project with that template. ➤ New ➤ Project. and Import dialogs. such as in a large. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. However. click Browse. click Places. 8 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 4 Click Cancel. select the folder to save your files to by default. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. In the following illustration. or loading a Revit MEP file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. Load.3 Under Default template file. 7 In the Options dialog. note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Save. 10 In the Places dialog. click Browse. and click Open. Click and click Browse to select a template.

The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Save. click the My Library icon. and select it as the library path. ➤ Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and Import dialogs. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Load. templates. click My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click OK twice. or families.11 In the Places dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click (Add Value). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click (Browse). and change the name to My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 15 Under Library Name.

4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 27 Click OK. This path is determined during installation. 19 Click Cancel. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Edit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 20 Click ➤ Options. specify the new location here. 2 In the Options dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 14 Click in the drawing area. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. such as bump maps. view the current path. select Ignore words in uppercase. 5 In the text editor. 22 Select My Library. 11 In the Options dialog. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 9 In the text editor. click Places.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. and decal image files. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click the Spelling tab. If you want to relocate this path. click OK. 21 On the File Locations tab. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. If you work in a large office. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. custom color files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 3 Under Settings.

22 In the text editor. click Edit. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 4 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. 19 In the Options dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Training Files. click OK. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rte. 20 Under Settings. 21 Under Personal dictionary. As you zoom in and out within a view. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. under Dimension Snaps. 2 In the New Project dialog. and enter 500 . You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Browse. click File menu ➤ Save. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Restore Defaults.. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. under Template file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click the Spelling tab. 18 Click ➤ Options. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Close. 23 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.17 In the Spelling dialog. In this exercise. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. you modify snap settings. you modify snap increments.

If it does not. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . This is the increment that you added previously. TIP To zoom while sketching. zoom out until it does so. deselect Chain. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. use the wheel button on your mouse. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.7 Under Object Snaps. enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. click OK. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. For example. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. If you do not have a wheel button. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and move the cursor to the right.

and specify the wall endpoint. and move the cursor to the right. and delete the value 500 . Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you move the cursor along the wall. the midpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Notice that snapping is once again active..Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 26 Close the file. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Do not set the wall end point. it will snap to the endpoints. and the wall edges. with or without saving it. 22 Move the cursor downward. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 19 Enter SM. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 25 Click OK.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .

44 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. water source heat pump (WSHP). If the tutorial training files are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you first plan the system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. go to http://www. At the end of the tutorial.autodesk. However. methodology. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and then you create a plenum level. you will understand the process. As you create the mechanical system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you design a mechanical system for an office building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. duct system and a hydronic piping system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. By following the recommended workflow. This system consists of a cooling tower. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this lesson. you first configure the linked architectural model.

roof. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 6 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and after the linked model highlights. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. click to select it. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. select Room Bounding. not in the MEP training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.rvt. and double-click West . 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. ceilings. you add a level for plenums. In this section. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . These components are defined in the architectural training file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. indicating that it’s the active view.MEP. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. Next. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.Space Plan is highlighted.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE When working with a linked file. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). For Offset. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. The new level is placed. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and click OK. 9 On the Draw panel. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. enter 2600mm. 16 Press Esc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and enter Level 2 Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and click Properties. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). Click Plan View Types. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser.

48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Apply Default View Template. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for View Range. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . Under Identity Data. enter 0. and for Offset. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Design.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Top. for Default View Template. select Level Above (Level 3). select Plenum Plan. ■ Click OK twice. enter an Offset of 300mm. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. However. Under Extents.Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select MEP . you place spaces in areas of the building model. for View Scale. For Cut plane. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. NOTE After finishing each exercise. For Sub-Discipline. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Edit. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you can choose to save your work.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the next exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For View Classification. Under View Depth. for Level. 20 In the Project Browser. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. In this exercise.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select New. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. select Level 2 Plenum. For (Tag Location). 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and ceilings). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. walls. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For Offset. enter 0. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Horizontal. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Space. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. Placing Spaces | 49 .

enter 219. ensuring coordination between the files. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Library. 14 In the drawing area.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 9 Select the space. Click OK. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Number. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.7 Click to place the space. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing Spaces | 51 . enter 0. and then click Modify. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. select Level 3. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Upper Limit. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Offset. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 23 Click OK.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . for Upper Limit. select Level 3. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar.Space Plan is highlighted. and then press Esc. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset.rvt. enter 0. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

and select Corridor. which was numbered 219Q. 10 Click in the number column. click in the name column. 9 In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. In the schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and change the space number to 216A. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . as shown.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. 15 Press Esc twice. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.

place a space in the lower area of the split space. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new space is numbered correctly (216B). you place a space in a chase. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.16 Using the method learned previously.

If necessary. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click Training Files. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.

For Offset. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 6 Enter VG. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 12 Click in the section view. In the plan view. click in the chase area to place the space. and click Element Properties. On the Options Bar. select Roof Level. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Spaces. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. select Interior and Reference. and then click OK. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select the space. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Upper Limit. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.4 Press Esc. right-click. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3. enter 0. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view.

and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 17 Type ZF. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. under Loaded Tags. enter Chase. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. floors. enter 1200. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. For Number. and maximize the view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .■ For Limit Offset. 15 Press Esc. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. for Name. enter 225PC. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. ceilings. Under Identity Data. Bounding elements (such as walls. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and click OK.Space Plan. All spaces in the view are tagged. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

it is automatically added to the Default zone. In the next exercises. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. To display space reference lines.Zoning is highlighted. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. click View ➤ Zones. under Spaces. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. After a space is placed in an area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. click Training Files. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and verify that All Disciplines is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt.20 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

and click OK. As you do this. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assign spaces to zones in the building. The Zone tool is active. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. click Reference. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. under Spaces. select Occupiable. Next. and a new zone is created. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. click Training Files. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and verify the zones in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning is highlighted. you assign spaces to a zone. the Edit Zone tab displays. To display space reference lines.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). indicating that the space is occupiable. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. ) or 5 In the System Browser.

4 In the drawing area. select HVAC Zones. In the System Browser. and Electrical 220 spaces. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). you can add or remove a space from the zone. To view the zone in the drawing area. Using the Edit Zone tab. Instruction. type VG. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and modify the zone properties. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. select Computer Lab 222. and click Finish Editing Zone.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Click OK. Instruction 221. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 5 With the drawing area active. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you need to activate the zone visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. click Reference. click Finish Editing Zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Identity Data.Zoning. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. for Name. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK.rvt.West . In this exercise. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. enter 2 . click Training Files. To display space reference lines. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Area B. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click in the Level 1 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Zoning view to activate it. expand 2 . 9 In the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.West . 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. under Spaces. 11 Close the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning is highlighted.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. click in the Level 2 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. Verify that the distance is 12mm. zoom out. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning floor plan. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Select Attached End. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 8 In the Level 1 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view.

and select 109 Lounge. double-click Level 1 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. on the ViewCube.East. In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Zoning to make it the active view. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. for Name Value. double-click the zone tag. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify the building. Front. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C.Zoning view. and zone information. enter Lounge . click the corner where the Top. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. space. click Training Files. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.rvt.

you isolate the space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Next. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. select 1_South_Area C. ■ ■ On the Details tab. ■ Click (Highlight). click (Isolate). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Using the Highlight tool.

■ ■ ■ Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). scroll down in the left pane. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. For Heating Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that 21. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. For Construction Type. the zone information displays for the selected zone. outdoor air per area. Next. For People. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and dehumidification set point. and then click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. cooling air temperature.33 °C : 12.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. Next.22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that 23. For Cooling Information. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. select Lounge/Recreation. click (Shading). You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and air changes per hour. heating air temperature. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. and in the People dialog. click .22 °C : N/A is specified.11 °C : 32. and humidification set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. This indicates the heating set point. and then click OK. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. the space information displays for the selected space. select 109 Lounge. click . NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and click OK. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . This indicates the cooling set point. For Electrical Loads. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.

and other room-bounding components. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Cancel. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. open MEP . enter 0.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. floors. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. roofs. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.

■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. enter 212P. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and select space Plenum 212P. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and zone information. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. you verified building. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Because this is an unoccupied space. Under Energy Analysis. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. space. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Under Energy Analysis. For Name. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify that the space has replaced the void. In this exercise. Click OK. select Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.

70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Level 1 is selected. under Energy Analysis.Space Plan. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select School or University. 8 In the drawing area. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . NH. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Export Complexity. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. In order to select a space. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Project Phase. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Postal Code. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. click Edit. you need to select this option. double-click Level 2 . for Energy Data. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK twice. verify that New Construction is selected. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. for Building Service. click in the Value field. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. On the Weather tab. For Sliver Space Tolerance. under Volume Computations. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that Manchester. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space Library 219. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. click Training Files. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Location. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. enter 03101. On the Place tab. For Building Construction. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. If. and click OK. and click OK. For Ground Plane. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. right-click. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that 300 is specified. for City.

For Latent. Click OK twice. For Space Type. or neither. click Edit. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Library . For Location. verify that School or University is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. for Values. both. m. and enter 15 sq. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. for Values. 12 Click the Details tab. verify that Manchester. verify that <Building> is specified. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. NH. select Specified. Under Power. and click to learn the cause for the warning. You have verified the building information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Next. enter 45 W. For Building Construction. and click OK. Click OK. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. Select the space associated with the warning. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select Specified. is specified. For Sensible. select Actual. select Heated and cooled. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and then click . For Building Service. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. For Condition Type. For People. select Actual. enter 60 W. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 .Audio Visual. for Values. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click in the Value column. a cooling load. for Values. verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. click Edit. Under Heat Gain (per Person). Select Area per person.

19 In the drawing area. 15 Review the loads report for project. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and can be modified here. or zone information. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. select 219 Library. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or make any changes to the model. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and a loads report displays. select 219 Library. click Information). See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. space. 21 Click OK. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.Space Plan. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and under Heating Information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. space. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. 16 After you review the loads report. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. weather. 17 In the loads report. In this exercise. click Calculate. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Energy Analysis. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. You should correct the space error in the building model. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . There should be no warnings displayed. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and zone information for the building model. and click OK.11°C. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.

indicating that it’s the active view. in relatively small increments. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. Click OK. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Color Scheme. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 5 Zoom in to the legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select HVAC Zones. 3 In the drawing area. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.rvt.

The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Expanded Ranges. under Schemes. and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select Cooling Load . select the color scheme legend. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

click Training Files. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 .Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the next exercise. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.

Click OK. click (Browse). For Name. for Formula.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Schedule building components. select Air Flow. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Under Available fields. select Spaces. and click OK. ■ Click Calculated Value. more category options are available. select HVAC.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces. enter Space Airflow Schedule. for Select available fields from. select New Construction. In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Phase. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Formula. For Type. enter Airflow Delta. enter . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then click .Space Fill is the active view. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Formula. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Discipline. In the Fields dialog.

select Airflow Delta. For Background Color. For Then by. ■ The schedule displays. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . right-click to access schedule properties. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the Color dialog. and click OK.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Header. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Under Conditions to Use. verify that Show is highlighted. select Level. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. select red. For Value. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. and Blank line. and then select Hidden field. Click OK twice. select Number. select Level. a view opens that contains the selected space. and then click Conditional Format. Select Ascending. click the color swatch. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. For Fields. select Not Between.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In this exercise. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.

you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. As you place the air terminals.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will create supply air systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After system creation. you modify air terminal parameters. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and work with the airflow schedule. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 79 . Then. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After completing the air systems lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. In this lesson.

2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.rvt. and scroll to space 223.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the ceiling view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.

8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. click Place on Face. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Placement panel. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Also. as shown. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 15 On the Options Bar. for Flow. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. the hosted elements are updated as well. If the host element is modified or moved. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 17 Move the cursor down. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. select the diffuser. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and press Enter. enter 215 L/s. type 3600. verify that Constrain is cleared. and press Enter. and then press Esc to end the command.

and click Open. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Next. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 28 On the Placement tab. 22 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . click Place on Face. As you place the return diffusers. as shown.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.rfa. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 21 On the Options Bar.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 24 In the Open dialog. 25 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers. click Yes. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag.

and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click OK. Level. click Yes. for Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. 32 In the Project Browser. select one of the return diffusers.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select Strong Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.

42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 40 In the drawing area.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. and then press Esc twice. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then select the top edge of the diffuser. as shown. 43 Using the same method. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. select the vertical grid line as shown. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. align the other return diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. for Flow. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling.44 While pressing Ctrl. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and press Enter. under Mechanical. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. clear LeftArrow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and click OK. select both return diffusers. right-click. enter 310 L/s. and click Element Properties. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. 47 Using the same method. 48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Design to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. 9 On the Options Bar. for Scale.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select M_Supply Diffuser .rvt. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. at the lower left corner of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the drawing area. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. click 1 : 100.Design ➤ Floor Plans. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. expand HVAC . click Training Files. 8 In the Type Selector. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.200 Neck. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. the space crossing lines display. and double-click Level 1 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .

Under Mechanical . the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. move the cursor down. type 6000. for Offset. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. enter 170 L/s.Airflow. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. and then press Enter. Click OK. 11 Select the diffuser. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. By copying the diffuser. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also. enter 2400. 15 Press Esc. under Constraints. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. for Flow.

16 Using the same method. clear Leader. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. and then press Esc. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.

22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. it is a negative value. and Flow. tile the windows. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 27 In the schedule. mark. For Category. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. enter 210 L/s. Next. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 29 Using the same method. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). click Edit. type. select Mark. select Air Terminals. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. Mark. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. select 21. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. and press Enter. for Flow. 26 Using the method learned previously. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. for Embedded Schedule. under Other. double-click System Type. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 25 Click OK 3 times. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. for Sort by. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. and then right-click in the schedule. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . under Available Fields. under space 115.

HVAC Plan . as shown. 31 In the drawing area.Design.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. As you highlight the zone. and maximize Level 1 . select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .43 W (approximately 1.Horizontal .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.7-18 kW . 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. and under Energy Analysis. select M_WSHP . 33 Click OK.High Efficiency .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.3 times the heating load). 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 36 In the drawing area. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.

select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. However. In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. right-click the title. You then create the logical connection between the system components. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you also use the System Browser to validate systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. As you add diffusers to systems. When you highlight a space. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. the space crossing lines display. enter . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. After creating the logical connection. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design is highlighted. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and click View ➤ Systems. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump.rvt. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and click OK. including energy analysis.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.

and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 11 In the drawing area. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and the system connects them. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the number of elements is updated. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. System Name. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Connect Into. and Flow value. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 12 In the System Browser. review the Number of Elements. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 15 Click Cancel. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 17 Using the method learned previously. On the Options Bar. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. the air terminals are the children. 18 Click OK.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 22 Click OK. for Mark. In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. In this exercise. for System Name. under Mechanical. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Rename the system Next.rvt. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. under Identity Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 25 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. you create ductwork to physically connect system components.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In this case.HVAC Plan. the Network type provides several solutions. which provides various layout tools. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 7 On the Options Bar. and display solution 1. For Flex Duct Type. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select Network. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 4 In the drawing area. For Duct Type. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Settings.Design is highlighted.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. for Solution Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. enter 3000. Also. For Duct Type. select the upper left diffuser. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Offset. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. A Generate Layout tab displays. enter 3000. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. select Flex Duct Round : Flex .Round. Select Branch. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the space crossing lines display. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.

All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Either relocate the system components. enter 900. as is the elbow itself. or offset elevations are incorrect. 11 Click Finish Layout. you’ll get an error in a later step. For example. Click OK. as shown. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. click Modify. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.

and equipment. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. If the entire network does not highlight. select Duct Color Fill . you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. The first time you press Tab. fittings. thus it is not part of the system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. for Color Scheme.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. a disconnection exists. highlight a segment of the main duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Using a flow-based color scheme. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and click to select it. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment.Flow. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. Usually.

20 In the drawing area. for Values Displayed. under Graphics. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and press Enter. select one of the diffusers in the system.Airflow. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. and on the Options Bar. select the WSHP. and click OK. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). but not all values are used in this view. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. under Mechanical . 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select By View. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and select 400. select Calculated Size Only. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Select the upper segment of main duct. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the duct. click Cancel. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).65 Pa/m.Velocity. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. 26 Click OK. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. and then click to select it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Friction. and drag it to the right. and enter . Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. for Schemes. Select Only. Click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select Restrict Height. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.

Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Using this tool. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Use the information that displays (flow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss. static pressure. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.The ductwork and fittings are updated. pressure.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish.NOTE As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. also known as the critical path. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m.

and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select the WSHP. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.

and click Draw Duct. double-click MEP . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the ViewCube. 14 In the Project Browser. click the corner where the Top. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. right-click the connector grip. for Offset.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. enter 3000. Front. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. select the top right diffuser.3D MEP. 11 On the Options Bar. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . NOTE When drawing duct.

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. in space 115. it is considered a closed loop. 19 In the drawing area. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is automatically created. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.22 Using the same method. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. and select the top left diffuser. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.

such as a plenum. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. select a segment of the main duct.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. for Flow. and then click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. 40 Using the same method. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Constraints. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear Restrict Height. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . under Mechanical .Airflow. and click to select it.

108 .

you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you place mechanical equipment. In this lesson. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. 109 . including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Create return and supply piping systems. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. on level 3 of the building model. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.

7-18kW . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.HVAC Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and select M_WSHP .Horizontal High Efficiency .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view.Left Return . in corridor 328.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar. click the dimension. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. and click to place the dimension. and enter 600. verify that Wall faces is selected. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 10 Select the WSHP. as shown. 8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.

as shown. and in the Type Selector. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.) 14 Click Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected. select the 2 WSHPs. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Under Mechanical. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Water Flow. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. enter 0. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Click OK.75 L/s. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Offset. enter 2750. as shown. 21 Click Modify.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Unlike logical connections (systems). Creating a Piping System In this exercise.22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. You can create pipes to connect system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. analyses cannot be performed. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the logical connection between the system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you create the return and supply piping systems. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. but without a corresponding system. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

and click View ➤ Piping. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. while pressing Ctrl. Therefore. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Mech 330). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This display indicates that the system is selected. click Training Files. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. where it is easier to review the information. Assigning a system component to an existing system. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 5 In the System Browser. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Creating a Piping System | 115 . indicating that it’s the active view. select the 2 WSHPs. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. As you assign equipment to systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system.rvt. right-click the Systems column heading.

for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. for System Name. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. Notice that on the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 13 Click Finish Editing System. select the boiler.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. 17 On the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 12 In the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.

In heating mode. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. 25 Select the boiler. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. In cooling mode. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.HVAC Plan . and click OK. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.Design. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 23 Close the roof plan view. under Design ➤ HVAC . the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 19 In the Project Browser.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. double-click Roof . and bypasses the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and select the cooling tower. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Expand All. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children).8. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The hydronic supply system highlights in red. expand Piping. for Water Flow. indicating the logical connection. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 32 In the System Browser. 29 Right-click CHWS. you can view several parameters. and click OK. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. In the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click Column Settings. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click Properties. under Mechanical. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click OK. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. enter 0.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.

rvt. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. the boiler. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. you can place the cursor over a system component. click Training Files. A system preview displays in red. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and click OK.Mech 330). and click to select it. When you draw a box to select components. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 5 In the Filter dialog. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then the Select a System dialog displays. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. press Tab to highlight the system. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . select Mechanical Equipment. click Check None.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.

select Perimeter. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 13 Click Cancel. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 10 Click OK. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or architectural components.9 In the Select a System dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. enter 450. select CHWR. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 11 On the Options Bar. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. verify that Solutions is selected. For Inset. structural beams. duct. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. It does not reference the architecture. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.16 Click Finish Layout. With each Tab. the flow for each WSHP is 0. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 17 Optionally. 19 In the drawing area. and press Tab 3 times. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.75 L/s. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .

50 L/s. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Water Flow is 1. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. and access its instance properties. 23 Under Mechanical.50 L/s. 22 Select the boiler.75 L/s). under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. verify that the value for Flow is 1.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 24 Press Esc. and click OK.

click Edit System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 27 On the System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. double-click Level 1 . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. the Number of Elements is now 8. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 32 Click Finish Editing System. Logically. 28 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.Design.HVAC Plan .

37 In the Instance Properties dialog.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. Next. note that the value for Flow is 4. you physically close the CHWR loop.50 L/s. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.94 L/s. 35 Using the drag control. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and click Cancel. so the total flow of 6. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. which propagates flow throughout the system. access its instance properties. under Mechanical.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.44 L/s. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. 38 Using the same method.94 L/s. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . For Inset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. Click Settings. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then click OK. 40 In the Select a System dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP. enter 450.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS. For Slope. enter 0.00%. 41 Click OK. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.

(Both sections are at the same elevation. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify. 47 In the drawing area. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. as shown.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Either relocate the system components. 51 Click Finish Layout. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). or manually modify the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). To create the piping system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. as shown. 50 Using the same method.49 Select the 4-way arrow control.

Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . and the return pipes are magenta. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. double-click 3D Building. click Training Files. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.HVAC Plan .

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. as shown. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 9 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. and press Esc to clear the selection.

and the lower one is secondary. select the return pipe riser. and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and click Draw Pipe.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 12 In the 3D view. 13 In the plan view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The connections are automatically created. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.

17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.In a plan view. enter 600. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and press Enter. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 381. and you select 1 connector.

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select the primary base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and the appropriate fittings are created. 18 Press Esc twice.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and click OK. As you place piping runs that are close together. 19 In the plan view.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. and select it. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click to draw the pipe. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. right-click the bottom connector. as shown.

click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1200. 31 On the Options Bar.28 Press Esc. 29 If necessary. and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc. these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

35 Using the method learned previously. as shown.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. type 300. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . for Offset. enter 2850. and press Enter.■ Move the cursor down. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.

37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Next.

The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click Element Properties.44 L/s. In the Instance Properties dialog. view the properties for the secondary pump. under Mechanical.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. When you create the pumps in parallel. right-click. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 46 Press Esc. 42 Click OK. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . for Cooling Water Flow. the value is 0 L/s. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click OK. right-click. as shown. The flow is being propagated through the piping. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.44 L/s). 43 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 40 Click Cancel. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. notice that Flow is 6. 44 In the 3D view. Connect the cooling tower Next. 41 Using the same method. 48 In the plan view. notice that under Mechanical. which is rounded up to 3. select the cooling tower.50 or 50% of the Flow.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 49 Press Esc. 50 In the 3D View. and close the dialog.44 L/s. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. select the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6.

144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. click Training Files. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan . you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Valves In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. When the valve is open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and is heated by the boiler. the water bypasses the cooling tower.

and select M_Ball Valve .4 On the Options Bar. Adding Valves | 145 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Press Esc twice. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. place another M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .

For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. right-click. and click OK. 19 Using the same method. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.44 L/s. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 147 . validate that the Flow is 6. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.

validate that the Flow is 6. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.44 L/s. 22 Using the method you just learned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select M_Ball Valve .■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. Initially. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.rvt. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. click Training Files. and select M_Ball Valve . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. In heating mode.44 L/s. 20 Select the bypass valve. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Size.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Flow.Design is highlighted. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.HVAC Plan . as shown. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes.

Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. and for Velocity. select a different layout solution. enter 1. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and enter 220 Pa/m. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 13 Press Esc. Either relocate the system components. Click OK. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. or manually modify the pipe. and click to select the branch. select Friction. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. Select And. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Under Constraints. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.5 m/s.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System In this exercise. click Training Files.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m.Design ➤ 3D Views. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.rvt. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and double-click 3D Building. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. Inspecting the System | 151 . Using the System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.

Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. flow. An inspection flag reports the section number. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as shown. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required.

0 L/s.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and double-click Level 3 . and click OK. 10 Click Finish. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. the Static Pressure is 41916. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and the Pressure Loss is 7160. you need to validate them.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. select 32° C. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.1 Pa. In the left pane of the Open dialog.7. and to size pipe.Note that the Flow is 1. 9 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. inspect Section 6 again.4 Pa. for Fluid Temperature. targeting those systems that need attention. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Warnings display.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise.rvt.

The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 4 In the System Browser. TIP If you have multiple views open. 10 Using the same methods. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. otherwise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Expand All. right-click Hydronic Return. 6 In the Project Browser. and for pipe sizing. double-click Level 1 . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. 7 In the System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). the pipe is associated with that system. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. If you place components without assigning them to a system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). thus assigning the components to a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. After you assign components to a system.HVAC Plan . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design floor plan. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and select Level 3 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. right-click the Systems titlebar. expand the Unassigned folder. 12 In the System Browser.Design. and click Show to view all of the system components. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and click View. and confirm unassigned system components. click Close. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. As you learned when placing components. In the System Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. After you have assigned all components to systems. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. For example. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting.

enter 70. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Select Correction Factor.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1. select Copper. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name.04. For Temperature. enter THHN. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ For Material.Wire Sizes. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. wiring. speeding up the design phase. click (Open). As you place components and create circuits. select Wiring Types. select 90. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. distribution systems. You also add a wiring type. In this exercise you review electrical settings. ■ Click New Correction Factor. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. click Training Files. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . expand Wiring . 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For Material. For Factor. select Copper.

select Single. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. Under More Than. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. select 240. select Distribution Systems. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . For Max Size. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For Minimum. select Power. For Conduit Type. For Neutral Size. enter 50. select Hot Conductor Size. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 1. For Insulation. For Value. select THHN. For L-G Voltage. For Maximum. enter 2000. select 10000 VA. For Phase.0. For Neutral Multiplier. enter 120/240. select 120. For L-L Voltage. By specifying a range. select Demand Factors. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 250. For Wires. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. enter 240. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select Steel.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. select Voltage Definitions. Click Split. select 3. enter 240. enter 220. select 75. Click OK. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. Select Neutral Required.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area.Lighting group in the space element properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. select Electrical . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. restrooms. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. click Add. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. and conference rooms. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. select Illuminance. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In this case the key style is the type of space and. select Electrical. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK twice. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . under the Electrical .Lighting Plan. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Later in the tutorial. enter Required Lighting Level.Lighting. and double-click Level 2 . Verify that Instance is selected. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. select Spaces. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). For Type of Parameter. Under Categories.Design ➤ Floor Plans. such as offices.rvt. click (Open). and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. For Group Parameter Under.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. click Training Files. For Discipline.

enter Lighting Levels. enter 485. under Available Fields. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. enter Space Lighting Requirements.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Name. and for Key Name. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. enter Open Office. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . Click OK. under Electrical . 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. and click OK. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Lighting. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. Click OK. double-click Required Lighting Level. Select Schedule Keys. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . change the sort order back to the default setting.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . Select Blank Line. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. select Required Lighting Level. Notice that as you enter the data. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.Lighting Plan. 21 Click OK twice. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. which is mapped to project units. for Sorting/Grouping. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. 22 Using the same method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit.

you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. click (Open). Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. under Identity Data.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Later in this exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for Lighting Levels. 27 Click OK. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. the value input applies only to the selected space. select Instruction-Standard. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

For example. Select the scheme for 500 lx. enter Required Lighting Levels. Select the scheme for At Least 20. for Category. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. verify the By Range is selected. for Title. for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. For Color. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ Click OK. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. click (Duplicate). and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m.00 lx. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. click (Add Value) again. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. enter Required Lighting and click OK. enter 900. then the new value will be 400 lx.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 00 lx still selected. enter 800.00. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes.00 lx. Under Schemes. Select the scheme for 450. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. click Training Files.rvt. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and press Enter.00. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. and click (Add Value).00 lx. and press ENTER. select Required Lighting Level. and in the At Least column. select Spaces. and press ENTER. enter 200. and click (Add Value) five times.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 .Lighting CF. Level. For Discipline. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. select Electrical. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. enter Lighting Delta. Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2 . Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. For Type. for Available Fields. Average Estimated Illumination. For Name. 8 In the drawing area. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. For Color Scheme. select Spaces. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Click OK. select Illuminance. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. double-click Number. select Required Lighting.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. select Spaces.

Select Header. Click OK three times. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. For Value. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. for Test. On the Formatting tab. Click Background Color. select Average Estimated Illumination. for Sort by. Click OK twice. select Red. type a hyphen. Click OK. under Condition. for Formula. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.■ For Formula. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. select Not Between. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Click Conditional Format. select Level. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. press the spacebar. Select Blank Line. select Required Lighting Level. and click Browse. click Browse. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Fields.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 171 .Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. as you place lighting fixtures. power circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Then. Create power loads. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create a panel schedule. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.

Under Scheme Definition. By using orange as the color for this range.rvt. click (Open). 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 7 In the Project Browser. In the Color dialog. select Average Estimated Illumination. click Training Files.Lighting Ceiling plan. 8 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Orange. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Basic Colors. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. for the Spaces Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select the color for Less Than 200 lx. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting CF view is open. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. You can create additional color schemes. 2 In the drawing area. select the color legend. Click OK. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. zoom to space Library 219. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 13 Click the Level 2 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).

the fixtures will move accordingly. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 20 Select the lighting fixture. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.5 fc range. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.277V. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.the +/. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range is satisfied. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 18 Click to place the fixture. 19 Press ESC to end the command.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Name enter and click OK. ■ Under Electrical Loads. enter 162.00 VA. scroll to view space space Library 219. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Name dialog. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Apparent Load.

■ In the Initial Color dialog. enter . and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. junction boxes. In the Select File dialog.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. click Training Files. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. select T5 [HO]. ■ Click Apply. 2 In the drawing area. ■ Click OK twice. and Receptacles | 183 . Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. and click OK. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Lamp. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click the value for Initial Intensity. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Placing Switches. enter F15. for Type Mark. Click OK. select Xenon and click OK. select 463T5_S. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.85.00 lm.93. Under Electrical. select the top center fixture. Under Photometrics. Placing Switches. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Junction Boxes. for Color Preset. specify 15000. click (Open). In the next exercise. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Junction Boxes. click the value for Light Loss Factor.ies and click Open.rvt. Under Photometrics. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. select Luminous Flux. you add switches. and receptacles to your design. enter . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. 9 In space Library 219. ■ Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

7 Click to place the switch.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V.

Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Select M_Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 185 .NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.NoLoad. The element type M_Junction Boxes .

enter 2750. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.14 Press ESC to end the command. In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 15 Select the junction box. zoom to space Library 219. 21 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK twice. NOTE When entering values. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Under Electrical. Click Edit Type. enter JB-1NL. for Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. note the Number of Poles is 1. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Mark. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Offset.

NOTE If necessary. Space Name. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. 24 For any column. Distribution System. Expand General.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Load. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Number. Select Size. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Voltage. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. right-click and click Column Settings. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Placing Switches. and Number of Elements. 23 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. Junction Boxes. Click OK.

35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. move the cursor along the wall. Junction Boxes. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle.

43 Press ESC to end the command. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down.

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. Junction Boxes. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 .

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and work toward the higher voltage.208V MCB . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .Surface: 100A. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.rvt. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.

480V MCB . Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. for Distribution System. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. for Max. Click OK. enter 20. 7 Press ESC to end the command.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. #1 Pole Breakers. enter LP-2B. 14 Select the panelboard. enter 20. enter PP-2B. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . For Panel Name. 8 Select the panelboard.Loads.Loads. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. for Max. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. #1 Pole Breakers. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .

zoom to space Instruction 221. 23 In the Filter dialog. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. click Check None. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 20 In the drawing area. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

33 Select the switch on the right. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .35 Select the left three-way switch. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.rvt.39 Using the same method. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Next you create circuits without showing wire. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m.Loads. click Check None. 42 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. select Wires. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. except without wire. enter 2. click Training Files. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and create permanent wiring.

expand Power. ■ 16 In the System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. Distribution System. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and verify that Load. and Voltage Drop are selected. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. Expand Electrical. Voltage. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Click OK. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Rating. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 13 In the System Browser. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser. 22 With the junction box still selected. under Electrical.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click OK. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. change the Voltage to 277V. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Tags.

43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click OK. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click below the first one to place it. click Edit Type. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter FR4. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Break. 47 In the drawing area.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. for Type Mark. under Identity Data. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Click Yes. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. For Circuit Number.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.rvt. 52 In the Save As dialog. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.rfa. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. for File Name. click Check None. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. click (Open). 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. and click Apply. enter a comma. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. click Training Files. Click OK. Click Save. 54 Select all of the tags. 57 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. and for Category. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Next you create a switch system. Click OK. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Creating a Switch System | 205 . 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical Lighting. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. enter a. Click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 2 In the drawing area.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. for Switch ID.

20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. enter b.Lighting. Click OK. under Electrical . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

click Training Files. under Electrical . Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and click Element Properties. Click OK. 7 In space Electrical 220. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and data systems. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Hot Conductors. enter 2. Click OK. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. and for Category.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.rvt. 4 In the Filter dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.Loads. Circuits are used for power. click Check None. select the PP-2B panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Next you create a circuit and size wire. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. lighting. click (Open). select Electrical Fixtures. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.rfa. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 19 Click OK. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. and in the drawing area. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Ground Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 15 In the Load Family dialog. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and in the right pane. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click to select the circuit. select Wiring.

Creating Power Loads | 209 . add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. click the connector of the first receptacle. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. 29 In space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. in space Instruction 221. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 26 Press Delete. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.

31 Close the file with or without saving it. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you balance the loads for your design. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.

6 Click OK. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. enter 30A. After re-balancing loads. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 3 In the Electrical space. Finally. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Rating. 1-#12. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Click OK. Had there been a greater imbalance. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 1-#10. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. click Open. the distribution is shifted. Under Electrical-Loads. zoom to space Electrical 220. 1-#12. Scroll down. 1-#10. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes.rvt. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. select panel LP-2B. click Rebalance Loads. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.

click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . under Electrical .Loads. and click Finish Editing Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click OK. Next you create a panel schedule. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 15 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 24 Click Select Panel. 14 Close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. enter 40A. enter 25A. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 17 Close the warning dialog. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.Loads. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. select the transformer TP-2B. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. for Rating.

7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet.Panel Schedules. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Under Body Text. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 10 Click OK twice. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Under Header Text. under Other. click Edit. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. for Font. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. The Panel Schedule Report displays. Under Header Text. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Click OK. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Appearance. select Berlin Sans FB. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Sheets (all). Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. click Training Files. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. and open E601 .rvt. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Bold and Italic. enter 4 mm. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Font Size. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 5 mm. Select PP-2B. 4 Close the report.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. for Font Size. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.

View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. In the System Browser. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. each with a load of 180VA. Expand Unassigned. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1.rvt. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. select space Lounge 212. click (Open).

23 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Select panel LP-2C. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. In the System Browser. 15 In the dialog. 16 Close the details dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. under Warnings. select MDP-1. for Panel. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Checking Your Design | 215 . Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 20 On the Options Bar.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. zoom to space Electrical 214. 17 In the drawing area. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.

216 .

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

219 . 4 In the Name dialog. type PVC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. click Duplicate.Design is open. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 2 In the Project Browser. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. In this lesson.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . right-click PVC . and click OK. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. and verify that Level 1 . Adding a pipe size. in addition to loading existing families. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. and click Properties. you create a PVC pipe type. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Sanitary. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Vent.rvt.

220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 28 Close the file with or without saving it.PVC . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Plastic. 13 In the right panel. select None. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter 10°. In the Project Browser. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee. 22 Click New Size. 27 For the new pipe size. enter 46.006 mm. click Modify.Sch 40 .Sch 40 . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select Sanitary. select Branch. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 17 In the left pane. 18 For System Type. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.PVC . PVC . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary.Sch 40 . 26 Click OK.DWV.000 mm. click Pipe Settings. 6 Click OK. and open Metric\M_Trap P . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 10 On the Selection panel. Tee. and click Main.DWV: Standard. For Offset.PVC . select M_Tee Sanitary . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.5 In the Type Properties dialog. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. Cross. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Training Files. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.rfa. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Tap. 25 For Outside. 21 In the right pane. for Material. under Pipe Types. 15 For System Type. enter 45. 24 For Inside Diameter. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for Nominal.Vent is listed. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.DWV: Standard. and click OK. enter 54. under Mechanical.293 mm. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. enter -1250.

Create the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system. and hot and cold water piping. sanitary piping. Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . vent. add a hot water heater. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

a toilet. select Sanitary 107. as shown. at the midpoint of the detail lines. and click OK. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . A preview of the piping layout displays. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base is placed. select one of the components in the system.

22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click OK. 27 For Offset. You accept this suggested solution. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select Branch. The default settings are automatically modified. and click Settings. 25 In the left pane. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 24 For Offset. 29 On the Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and modify it to meet project requirements.Sanitary.05%. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -350 mm. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 21 On Options Bar. enter 1. enter -1225. click Solutions.Sanitary. 30 Click Modify. 23 For Pipe Type. for Diameter. for Slope.19 On the Options Bar. select 100 mm. select PVC . 28 On the Options Bar. select Main. enter -350 mm. select Intersections. 26 For Pipe Type. for Solution Type. select PVC . and for Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.33 In the 3D view. 34 Click Modify.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Overall. When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.

and check the slope control.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown.

and verify that Level 1 . select 560 mmx560 mm . click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. in the Type Selector. under M_Lavatory . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Rectangular.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan .Public.Design is open. as shown.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 8 Select the sink. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. enter 711. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . select Multiple.7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink.2.

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711. Press Esc. 12 In the drawing area.2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the third sink. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . as shown.16 On the Edit System panel.Overall. 20 Select the fitting. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. double-click 3D Plumbing . click Finish Editing System. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 21 Select the tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. under Design ➤ Plumbing . In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view.

26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). with the tee fitting selected. and click Apply. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 27 Click Modify. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. for Slope. for Offset. press Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click to draw the pipe.22 In the plan view. enter 760 mm. enter 1. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.05%. When you press the Spacebar.

Sch 40 .PVC .DWV. 29 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the double wye fitting. click to place the fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. move the cursor over the stub pipe. and when the vertical center line displays. 30 In the 3D view. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. for Offset. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 150 mm.33 With the fitting selected. 37 Select the fitting. 36 In the section view. on the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 305 mm. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. and press Enter. 34 Press Esc. right-click the right connector. double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.

which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. as shown. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. 49 Using the same method. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 46 In the section view. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. enter 150 mm. right-click the bottom connector. 47 Move the cursor down. 48 Click Modify. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.

Sch 40 . 51 In the Type Selector. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 55 In the 3D view. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select Standard.DWV. 56 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 54 Click Modify. under M_Trap P . 52 In the plan view.PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.. Click Modify. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. enter 150 mm. In the plan view. Click in the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. select the left P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

as shown. and select a proposed solution. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. select PVC Sanitary. In the Type Selector.■ In the 3D view. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Press Esc. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .

65 Close the file with or without saving it.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. 62 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.rvt. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.05% is selected. click Finish. and verify the slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. for Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. verify that 1. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.

DWV. 9 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Modify.PVC . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . select the vertical stack. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design.Overall. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. select Standard.Sch 40 . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. as shown. 5 Select the tee. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 7 On the Selection panel. 10 In the 3D view. right-click the top connector. 3 In the Section view.Design. and click Draw Pipe. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the elbow fitting on the right.Floor level line. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Plumbing Plan . and click to draw the pipe.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. After finishing each exercise. go to http://www. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. 2 Right-click Standard.autodesk. and click Duplicate. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.rvt. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. However. If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click Training Files.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this lesson. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can choose to save your work. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 267 . In this tutorial. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.

For Offset. In the left pane. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. structural beams. For System Type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. However. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. For Offset. select Carbon Steel. duct. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. verify that 2800 is specified. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 6 In the Project Browser.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). and click Properties. you create project parameters and work with schedules. and then click OK. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Main. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Next. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. or architectural components. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. for Material. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For System Type. under Mechanical. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. you modify the type properties of the pipe. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. click Rename. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that 2800 is selected. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click OK. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. 5 Click OK twice. Under Categories. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select the upper half of the building. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. for Sprinkler Zone. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . enter Zone 1. click Add. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Sprinkler Zone.Design is highlighted. and click Element Properties. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Fire Protection Piping Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Using a crossing window. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 6 In the drawing area. for Name. right-click. select Fire Protection. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Spaces. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. the space crossing lines display. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m.

13 Using the same method. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then click OK. under Fire Protection.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then access instance properties. including a calculated value parameter. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. for Sprinkler Zone. to which you add various parameters. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Zone 2. click Training Files. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. select Zone 1.

create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Fire Protection. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. indicating that it’s the active view. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Units. 10 In the Format dialog. 9 On the Formatting tab. 11 Click OK twice. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select mm. and on the ribbon. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 6 Using the same method. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Length. select 0 decimal places. For Name.Design is highlighted. For Rounding. click the Formatting tab. click Add Parameter. and click Field Format. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. for Name. For Type of Parameter. For Key name. Click OK. Select Schedule keys.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Unit symbol. select Spaces. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Group parameter under. enter Maximum Spacing. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Millimeters. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 14 Select the new header. Obstructed-Combustible.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. double-click on each column separator. enter Light. select Maximum Spacing.

272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Extra. enter 40. enter Sprinkler Schedule. and press Enter. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. 16 Using the same method. select Spaces. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. For Name. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter 4575. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column.

select Common. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Formula. For Units. under Available fields. 22 Click OK twice. For Type. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Area.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Minimum Sprinklers. Click OK. and click Field Format. select 0 decimal place. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Fixed. 20 On the Formatting tab. click . 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Discipline. select Number. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Fields dialog. and click OK. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Enter the formula operator / after Area.

select Sprinkler Zone. 26 Click OK 3 times. Select Header and Blank line. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. ■ In the Format dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. for Sort by. under Other. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. for Sorting/Grouping. select Hidden field. and select Totals only. click Edit. select Number. At the bottom of the dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Grand totals.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then select Hidden field. Select Header and Blank line. Under Field formatting. select Level. select Level. and then click Field Format. For Then by (second instance). For Then by. and click View Properties. select Minimum Sprinklers. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Fields.

click Edit. double-click Type. delete the word Maximum. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Filter. Under Field formatting. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Available fields. select Embedded Schedule. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. for Fields. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. For Category. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. click Edit. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. System Name. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and select Totals only. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and Count. select Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab. 30 Click OK twice. for Embedded Schedule. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog.27 In the drawing area. under Other. select Level equals Level 2. select Grand totals. select Calculate totals. for Filter by.

under Identity Data.Fire Protection Plan Design. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Unobstructed. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 48 In the floor plan. and click OK. 50 Access the instance properties. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select Ordinary. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. under Identity Data. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select Light. select Ordinary. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. 43 Click Cancel. Unobstructed. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 41 In the plan view. under Identity Data. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. As a result.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select space 221 Instruction. double-click FP . 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 44 In the schedule. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

click Training Files. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. 279 . However. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2 . you can choose to save your work. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will understand the process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. By following the recommended workflow. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. As you create the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . go to http://www. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you place the sprinklers. methodology. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.

After placing the initial sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When there is a small misalignment. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When this happens.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. select the sprinklers that you placed. verify that Constrain is cleared. 9 In space Instruction 202. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 206. Also. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and 207. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 10 Press Esc twice.

17 In the Project Browser. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.Design. open Design ➤ FP . as shown. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. specify a vertical offset. Next. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 200B.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and 200C).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 18 Type WT. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and then press Esc.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.

and click Element Properties. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. After creating the logical connection. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).0. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. under Constraints. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and with piping (physical connection). it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. for Offset. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. move the cursor to the right. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.FP_Ceiling view. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Next. enter 2900 mm. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. In the next exercise. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. In this exercise. For Number. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 4100. and press Enter. 29 Press Esc. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 11. you adjust the offset. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Notice that the schedule updates. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.19 In the floor plan. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. This number is determined in the schedule. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. 25 Click OK.

Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 1 In the Project Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Unlike logical connections (systems).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click View ➤ Systems. click Training Files. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Right-click the header. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.Fire Protection Plan .rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Design is highlighted. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. However. and select Piping. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.

Next. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. within the Piping Systems folder. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. press Tab. In the System Browser. and click Select. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. indicating the logical connection. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select an initial piping layout. Creating a Piping System | 285 . TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and select the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. named Fire Protection Wet. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser.

19 Click OK. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. For Offset. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. click Settings. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.0 is specified. For Pipe Type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 23 For Offset. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Main is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . When the layout is finished. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). verify that 2800. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 22 On the Options Bar. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. select Branch. 14 Click Finish Editing System.Wet is selected. The Generate Layout tools are activated. enter -3650. 15 In the drawing area. for Diameter. enter FP Wet_Zone2. system equipment. and a piping layout preview displays. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for System Name. In the left pane. providing system editing tools.The Edit Piping System panel displays. click Solutions. and on the Options Bar. click Place Base. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and number of elements in the system. select 150 mm. 13 In the System Browser.

First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. verify that Network is selected. On the Generate Layout panel. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Modify. Creating a Piping System | 287 . and select solution 4. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. A (parallel movement control) displays. In general.

select a different layout solution. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. 29 Click Finish Layout. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or manually modify the pipe. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 32 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. or that offset elevations are incorrect. as shown. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.33 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . the Connect Into tool.rvt.Fire Protection Piping Plan . click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Next. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 3 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and select the elbow fitting as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in.

radiators. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. you can select the pipe or duct. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. air terminals. mechanical equipment. click Add To System. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and pipe or duct is created. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 5 In the drawing area. 9 On the Edit System panel. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. or a system component to display system tools. 8 In the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system.

and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 23 View the result in the 3D view. for Solution Type. 13 Click Finish Layout. and select solution 5. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 12 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and then tile the views. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 18 Click Finish Editing System. verify that Solutions is selected. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 14 Close the System Browser. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Piping Plan. verify that Network is selected.11 On the Generate Layout panel.

28 In the drawing area.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Pipe. 29 Using the same method.24 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc. for Offset. select 2800. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . right-click. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 On the Options Bar.

Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. for Scale.rvt. Because the whole system highlights.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. click Training Files. 31 In the plan view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Fire Protection Piping Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select 1 : 50. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. 8 Right-click.6 Press Esc. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click on the section head to open the section view.

select FP . enter 2135. 15 Press Spacebar. for View Name. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. For Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 14 Select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 22 In the drawing area. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and click Apply Default View Template.Fire Protection Plan . for Sub-Discipline. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 10 In the Project Browser.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Design the active view.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. right-click Design ➤ FP . 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Under Identity Data. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . select MEP Section. 17 Move the cursor up. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . drag the top section boundary line up.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and then right-click the top connector. 12 If necessary. and then click Modify. enter FP Section_Stair. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Design. 19 Make Level 2 . Click OK. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design. For View Classification.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. and press Enter.

25 Verify that Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe. and then click Modify.23 In the section view. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). for Diameter. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 24 Select the cabinet. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. select .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 32 In the Open dialog. and then click Modify.29 Close the section view. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . click Yes to load a family. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that M_Gate Valve . and click Open.50 mm is selected.rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 33 In the Type Selector.

2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.Design ➤ 3D Views. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. click Training Files. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. or height. for Diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. or width. select 25mm. height. Changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. click Check None. and click OK. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 6 In the Filter dialog.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify. width. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 7 On the Options Bar.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 12 If necessary. select the linked architectural file. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. and after each segment highlights. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Clear Leader. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. and click Open. By hiding the linked file. click to place the tag. 18 In the 3D view. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. . Press Esc. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view.rfa. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs).

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . for Diameter. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. and when the section highlights. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The main piping is selected and displays in red. select 100mm.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 21 On the Options Bar. press Tab.

for Diameter. The pipe diameter is modified. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 Using the same method. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 23 Close the 3D view. as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the drawing area. and then tag the piping as shown. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select 40mm. and maximize the floor plan.

28 Close the file with or without saving it.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. you created a wet fire protection system. You added tags to pipes. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this exercise. For additional practice. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.

304 .

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details.

306 .

Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click OK. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and apply a view template.rvt. click Training Files. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. and view references.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Properties. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 307 . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. If the view included detail graphics. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. dependent views. right-click Copy of Level 1. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. matchlines. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan.

right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 6 In the Project Browser. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. as shown. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click OK. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and click Rename. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template. 4 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Training Files. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. create dependent views for areas B and C. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Close the file without saving. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. more focused. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and then press Esc. and click OK. views and put them on the sheet. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 In the drawing area. 9 Click OK. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

select Double Dash . Creating Dependent Views | 309 . and click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 14 Click Finish Matchline. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 19 In the drawing area. For Line Weight. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select black. 13 Press Esc twice. Click OK. click the current value. For Line Pattern. select 11. In the Color dialog. and then press Esc. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 25 Using the same method. as shown. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. on the Options Bar. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 21 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.20 Select the upper view reference and. for Target view.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. For Default View Template. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and click Properties. enter Plumbing Isometric . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. for View Name.Domestic Water. select Plumbing Isometric. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 27 Using the same method. and select the section box. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.rvt. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to each of the view references.

8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 3. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. 6 In the Project Browser. For Pattern. select Documentation. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Plumbing. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. For Sub-Discipline. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click OK. select Dash. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Apply Default View Template. Click Apply. and click to select it. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 10 Right-click. for View Classification.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Domestic Water. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and then click OK.

and click to select it. 13 Using the same method.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 15 Right-click. and click to select it.

5mm Arial. and in the Type Selector. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. select 1. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. verify that Common is selected. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. specify Plumbing . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click on the Format value.Isometric.16 Press Esc.Sanitary Waste. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. For Slope. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and in the view properties. and for Default View Template. 19 Using methods learned previously. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .

and then place the callout view on a sheet. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. for Rounding. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. click Training Files. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. select To the nearest 10. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Press Esc twice. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .■ In the Format dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 22 Click OK twice. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and click to place the spot slope annotation. as shown. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. When the view is associated with a sheet.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. select 1 : 50. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). for Scale.

under Sheets (all). 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and select the viewport. 13 In the Project Browser. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 5. Click OK. using the same method. for Line Weight. double-click M601 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. drag it to the sheet.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.

Creating Callout Views | 319 . right-click the callout view. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. for View Name. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. For Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter WSHP PART PLAN.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

right-click the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. under Names. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click Apply View Template. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 26 In the Rename View dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.

322 .

rvt. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. click Training Files. symbols. and annotation to create a legend. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. linetypes. Creating Annotations In this exercise. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 323 . as shown. duct tags. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. work with model-based components.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and select 1. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 With the text still selected.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 9 Press Esc twice.

and then click Right Straight. a return diffuser. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct. select a supply diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and a segment of rectangular duct.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 . 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. as shown. 16 In the drawing area.

rfa. clear Leader. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category. for Ducts. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.17 Click Modify. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 25 In the drawing area. 20 In the Tags dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 21 In the Load Family dialog. If necessary.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. 22 In the Tags dialog. and click Open. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK. click Load. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and then press Esc. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Creating Annotations | 327 . Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.26 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Leader. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End. select Horizontal.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 36 Press Esc twice. then click to the right to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. select Free End. 34 In the drawing area.

40 Using the method learned previously. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and click OK. and lock lighting fixtures. indicating that it’s the active view. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. select the last tag placed. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and all elements of that type are affected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. That’s because you changed a type property. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. click Training Files.rvt. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions | 329 . for Leader Arrowhead. not simply an instance property. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. lay out. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. you use temporary dimensions to locate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

12 Click EQ. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 14 Using the same method.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. and then select the interior face of the wall. select the dimension line. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 13 Press Esc. On the Options Bar. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.

annotation symbols. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and notes.9).Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. enter 2430. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and press Enter. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Using the same methods. and offset them from the wall. click Training Files. linework. 17 Press Esc.rvt. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Because the dimensions are locked. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Creating a Legend | 331 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

For Scale. 10 Using the same method. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View. click below the title to place the diffuser. select Floor Plan. 5 Click in the drawing area. select 1 : 50.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.200 Neck. Click OK. ■ 9 In the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. enter Diffuser Legend. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . and select 1.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click next to the top diffuser.11 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 333 .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 14 In the drawing area. and select 1.

DROP and its text note. 26 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 21 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 24 Select the component’s break line. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .

Creating a Legend | 335 . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 35 Change the text on the right to N.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 34 Using the method learned previously. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND.

41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. and select Title w Line .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

A drafting view using detail components.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. click Training Files. detail groups. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 337 . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.113 East elevation view. A detail callout that references another view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and text. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m.

7 Drag the Power Riser . 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and then modify and align the views. and click to place it. clear Leader. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. place Power Riser . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 5 In the drawing area. select each of the 2 panelboards. Next. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.113 East on the sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 Using the same method.

enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. under Identity Data. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 13 Right-click. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Activate View.9 Press Esc. for Title on Sheet. right-click. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Deactivate View.

17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. and select Title w Line . In the next exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Activate View.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 22 Press Esc. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the 113 East elevation view.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the drag control. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. right-click. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.

8 On the Options Bar. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Line Styles dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . indicating that it’s the active view. In the New Subcategory dialog.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click OK. click Training Files. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. verify that Chain is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. notice that there are no snaps active. Under Modify Subcategories. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click New. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). for Line Weight. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 2 Close the Project Browser. enter Electrical Power.113 North view. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Lines. As you draw. for Name. 9 Beginning at the transformer. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click OK.rvt. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. select 6. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm.

TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 33 On the Options Bar. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 29 Click Modify. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 28 Click above the cap. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). select Multiple.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc.

enter 12. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. you can ensure that they stay together. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.0. for Offset. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click on the length dimension value. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. You enter exact values for each line length. enter 7. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. change the length of the bottom line to 3.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . Press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter. enter 3. and press Enter. Using the same method. and then press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 40 Press Esc.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click OK. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing .45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. while pressing Ctrl. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 47 In the drawing area. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 51 Using the method learned previously. and then press Esc. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. enter Ground. select all 3 lines. 50 With the group selected. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. for Name. 52 Select the detail group. 54 Select the group. 46 In the Project Browser.

58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and will place it on sheet E01. In later exercises. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and then press Esc. 2 Zoom in to view the section. click Training Files. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Apply View Template. and then click the corner where the Top. 4 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 3 Select the section box. for Name. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Home. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click Rename. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 Right-click the copy. Back. Walkthroughs. 8 On the ViewCube. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m.rvt. select 3D Views. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

select 3D HVAC Iso. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click OK. Move the cursor down and to the left.■ ■ Under Names. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Typical. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. To rotate and reposition a text label. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK.18 Press Esc. and under Extents. under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Complete the text labels. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . type VP to open the instance properties for the view. as shown.

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. select Crop View and Section Box. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 30 On the View Control Bar. 33 Right-click the view. scroll down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.rvt. and click Deactivate View. specify 1 : 2 for the scale.25 Click OK. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 32 In the Instance Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click View Properties. 29 Right click the view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. click Training Files. clear Crop Region Visible. Place a detail component. and click Activate View.

The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 12 On the Element panel. For View Classification. as the rectangle start point. 13 In the drawing area. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Click OK. select Plumbing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. select Documentation. For Scale. as shown. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Properties. click the point at the top of the drain. select 1 : 5. 9 Zoom in to the component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. for Sub-Discipline. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. right-click the view name. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 3 In the Project Browser.

20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. Concrete. 21 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.I. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 18 With the filled region still selected. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 22 Click Modify. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.P. for Type. select C. and then press Esc.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. (Line). 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 34 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Multiple. 23 In the drawing area. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. select the filled region. and then click to select them. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the side of the slab above the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then press Esc.

45 Using the method learned previously. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. select the Flashing Membrane group. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.D.. and click OK. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 49 Click Modify. press Tab to highlight the chain. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. and then click to select them. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle). for Name. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.

54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. 55 Press Esc. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. press Spacebar twice. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

67 On the Options Bar. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 64 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. as shown.62 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and then click OK. and click to specify the text insertion point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. and click to specify the second leader point.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. select 15000 (Division 15 . 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. 81 Select the text note. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).70 In the Keynotes dialog. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 71 Click Modify. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 80 Press Esc twice. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 72 If necessary.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide.

91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 90 Press Esc. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 . select the view title. 88 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .